Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









Initial Screen

 [General explanation]

    This tool is used for programing the system data, saving the system data to
      FD/HD, loading the system data from the FD/HD, diagnosing the DSHS.
      DSHS ; Digital Super Hybrid System
      FD ; Floppy disk
      HD ; Hard disk

    This tool works under following circumstance.
      PC ; IBM-PC XT/AT or compatible personal computers
      OS ; PC-DOS V3.1 or later version      Memory : 640Kbyte

    You can confirm the version of this tool by pressing [Alt]+[V].










Initial Screen

 [Support DSHS ROM Version]
 <KX-TD1232>  CE :   P241B, P141E, P141C, P141B, P011W, P011K
                 :          P141F, P141D
                 :          P141G
                 :          P241A
              SA :   P261A, P161B,        P161A
              NL :   P281B, P181B, P181A,               P011M
                 :          P181C,                      P091A
                 :          P281A
              SP :   P291A, P191B, P191A,        P011Z
              JT :   P151D, P151C, P151B, P151A
                 :   P251A
 <KX-TD816>   CE :   P341A, P441C, P441A, P051C
                 :   P341B, P441D, P441B, P051E
                 :          P441E
                 :          P441F
              SA :   P361A,        P461A
              NL :   P381A, P481B, P481A, P051B
                 :   P381B,               P051J
              SP :   P391A, P491A
              JT :   P351A, P451A


Initial Screen

 [File]
    Next files will be used or created by this tool.
      E1232B2.EXE ; Execution File of this tool
                    In order to execute this file, enter "E1232B2" after
                    changing the directry where this file exist.
                    Enter "E1232B2 /MONO" for monochrome display.
                    If your CRT adaptor is MDA,enter the command "E1232B2 /MDA".
      XXXXXXXX.DBI; The system data File
      XXXXXXXX.DBA; ASCII character converted File of the system data screen
                    You can create this file at "3.Disk File Management" screen.
                    You can print out this File to usual printer.
      E1232COM.DAT; Comunication parameter File
      P1232.PRT   ; When you press[Alt]+[P] , the displayed screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232.PRT". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.
      P1232B2.HLP ; When you press[Alt]+[F4] , all HELP screen will be
                    saved into the file "P1232B2.HLP". This file is ASCII
                    character format and you can print out this file
                    from usual printer.



Initial Screen

 [Function]
    1.System Data Programing(BATCH)
        You can program the system data on PC memory without connecting with the
        DSHS.
    2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE)
        You can program the system data on DSHS memory through RS-232c or Modem.
    3.Disk File Management
        You can SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
        You can LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
    4.DSHS Management
        You can SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory
        through RS-232C or MODEM.
        You can diagnose the DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM.
    5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect
        You can Connect/Disconnect PC with DSHS thrugh RS-232C or MODEM.






Initial Screen

 [How to use these Function]
    Initial Operation
        When you start to use this tool, please make the DEFAULT system data
        on FDD/HDD.
            a.Clear the system data of DSHS by system clear switch of DSHS.
            b.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            c.Connect PC with DSHS by useing Connect function
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            d.SAVE the system data of DSHS to PC memory by useing SAVE function.
              (4.DSHS Management)
            e.SAVE the system data of PC memory to FD/HD by useing SAVE
              function.(Disk File Management)
              Now the DEFAULT system data is made up on designated directry of
              FD/HD.
        If possible, you had better to make the DEAULT data of parallel
        connection system(double cabinet system).
        You can load double cabinet system data to single cabinet system or
        double cabinet system.





Initial Screen
    Installation of new DSHS
        When you install new DSHS, next operation is recommended.
            a.LOAD the DEFAULT system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (3.Disk File Management)
            b.Program the system data. (1.System Data Programing(BATCH))
            c.SAVE the new system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)
            d.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            e.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C.
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            f.LOAD the new system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (4.DSHS management)
     Saving the system data
        When you change the system data from PT program mode,
        please save new system data.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.SAVE the system data from DSHS memory to PC memory.
              (4.DSHS Mangement)
            d.SAVE the system data from PC memory to FD/HD.
              (3.Disk File Mangement)


Initial Screen
     Loading the system data
        When you lost system data on DSHS, LOAD the system data from PC.
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.LOAD the system data from FD/HD to PC memory.
              (4.Disk File Mangement)
            d.LOAD the system data from PC memory to DSHS memory.
              (3.DSHS Mangement)
     Change the system data directly
            a.Connect PC and DSHS with RS-232C cable.
            b.CONNECT the PC with DSHS through RS-232C or MODEM
              (5.DSHS Connect/Disconnect)
            c.Program the system data
              (2.System Data Programing(INTERACTIVE))









Initial Screen

 [Connection of RS-232C]
     When you connect the DSHS with PC, use RS-232C cable.
     Pin connection is following.
                DSHS(25pins)      PC(9pins)
                AA FG  1    ---
                BB RXD 3    ---   3 TXD BA
                BA TXD 2    ---   2 RXD BB
                CB CTS 5    ---   7 RTS CA
                CA RTS 4    ---   8 CTS CB
                CD DTR 20   ---   6 DSR CC
                AB SG  7    ---   5 SG  AB
                CC DSR 6    ---   4 DTR CD

 [Connection of MODEM on PC]
     To connect with PC from remote site, use a Hayes compatible modem(AT
     command) on PC. The modem must be able to use one of the following
     standards.
            CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, BELL 103, BELL 212A
     This tool will use next AT command.
            Z=Reset D=Dial E=Echo back H=Line hook V=Result code
            F=full duplex mode B=Communication standard +++=Escape
            S=Register assignment

Initial Screen

 [Operation]
    1. Change the screens
       1   The initial screen
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
       2   The menu screens
           Press ENTER key to advance to the next screen.
           Press EXIT key to return to the initial screen.
       3   The editing screens
           Press F5(P-PAGE) key to return to the previous page.
           Press F6(N-PAGE) key to advance to the next page.
           Press EXIT key to return to the menu screen.
    2. Types of fields
       There are two types of the fields.  You can distinguish the type by
       a display of the cursor or a message.
       1   Selecting type
           A parameter is highlighted.
           A message "Hit spacebar to select........." appears.
       2   Entering directly type
           The cursor is displayed as an underline in a field.
           A message "Enter........" appears.



Initial Screen
    3. Move the cursor
       You can use TAB key, ENTER key, or cursor keys to move the cursor to
       the next or the previous items.
           TAB key:   Moves the cursor to the next item.
           SHIFT+TAB: Moves the cursor to the previous item.
           ENTER key: Moves the cursor to the next item.
           Up key:    Moves the cursor to the upper or previous item.
           Down key:  Moves the cursor to the lower or next item.
           Right key: Moves the cursor to one figure right or the next item.
           Left key:  Moves the cursor to one figure left or the first
                      character of the previous item.













Initial Screen
    4. Enter, correct and change parameters
       1  Selecting type
           -Press the spacebar a few times until you find the parameter you
            need.
           -Press BS key, which displays the parameters in the inverted order of
            the spacebar until you find the parameter you need.
           -F4(HELP) provides you the explanation of assigning items and a list
            of parameters.
       2  Entering directly type
           -Enter dialing numbers, numerals, alphabets and punctuation marks
            etc. directly.
           -You must enter parameters from a left end.
           -Correcting   Move the cursor to the parameter you want to correct
                         and enter a new parameter.
           -Deleting     Press BS key and the cursor moves to one figure left
                         and delete one letter.
                         Move the cursor to the letter you want to delete, and
                         press DEL key.
                         Press Ctrl + Home to delete the parameter in which the
                         cursor is placed.
           -Inserting    Move the cursor to the letter before which you want
                         to insert letters.
                         Press INS key needed times,and enter a parameter there.

Initial Screen
    5.Function keys
            F2(COPY):    Copies parameters by CO lines, extensions, CO line
                         groups or jack numbers.
                         Move the cursor to source line (or screen).
                         Push F2(COPY) Button and
                         Enter the Destination Range No.
            F4(HELP):    Explains assigning items.
            F5(P-PAGE):  Returns to the previous page.
            F6(N-PAGE):  Advances to the next page.
            F7(SAVE):    Saves the data displayed on the screen.
            F7(CONNECT): Connects IBM-PC with DSHS.
            F8(EXIT):    Returns to the menu screen.












System Data Programming Main Menu

    In this program you program all features of DSHS.

    1.  Line Menu

        Assigns features to each CO line or CO Line group.  The following
        features are assignable.

        1. CO Line Setting 1
           - CON(CO Line Connection Assignment)
           - TRG(CO Line Group Assignment)
           - DIAL(Dial Mode Selection)
           - DTMF(DTMF Time Selection)
           - PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection)
           - CID(Caller ID Assignment)
           - CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set)
           - CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set)
           - DIL 1:1 Ext No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night)
           - Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment)
           - Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set)




System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. CO Line Setting 2
           - Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment)
           - Name(CO Line Name Assignment)
           - ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment)
           - DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment)

        3. CO Line Groups(TRG)
           - Intercept EXT No. Day/Night (Intercept Extension - Day/Night)
           - Flash Time(Flash Time)
           - Pause Time(Pause Time)
           - DSC Time(Disconnect Time)
           - PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes)
           - TBL No.(Table Number Assignment)










System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. ISDN Internal/External
           - Line Type
           - L1 Mode
           - L2 Mode
           - Access Mode
           - TEI Assign
           - MSN Service
           - Extension Tone

        5. CO Line Table
           - Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment)
           - Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment)
           - RMV(TIE Subscriber Number Removed Digit)
           - Add Dial(TIE Added Number)
           - Wink Timeout(TIE Wink Time Out Assugnment)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        6.TIE TRG Setting
           - CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer)
           - TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer)
           - TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type)
           - LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence)

        7.TIE Port Setting
           - Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type)
           - Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit))
           - Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive))
           - Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial)

        8.TIE Routing Table
           - Dial(TIE line access code)
           - Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit)
           - Add(TIE Modify Added Digit)
           - Group(CO line group hunt sequence number)





System Data Programming Main Menu

    2.  Station Menu

        Assigns features to each jack or DSS console.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Station Setting
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - XDP(Extra Device Port)
           - CHG(Charge Verification Assignment)
           - EXG(Extension Group Assignment)
           - Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)
           - DDI NO. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)
           - LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment)

        2. COS & Mailbox ID
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes)
           - Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display)


System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. CO line Outgoing
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)

        4. DIL 1:N
           - DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
             - Day/Night)

        5. ISDN Internal 1
           - EXT(Extension Number Set)
           - Name(Extension Name Set)
           - Charge Limit(Charge Limitation)

        6. ISDN Internal 2
           - COS Pri(Class of Service Primary)
           - COS Sec(Class of Service Secondary)
           - CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO line Assignment - Day/Night)







System Data Programming Main Menu

        7. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment)

        8. Flexible CO Keys
           - Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment)

        9. DSS
           - DSS(DSS Console Assignment)















System Data Programming Main Menu

    3.  System Menu

        Assigns features to DSHS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. Day/Night
           - Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode)
           - Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time)

        2. Class of Service
           - TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night)
           - Durat Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit)
           - TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line)
           - Call FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line)
           - Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override)
           - Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny)
           - DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override)
           - Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode)

        3. Emergency Dial
           - Number(Emergency Dial Number Set)



System Data Programming Main Menu

        4. Speed Dial
           - Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set)
           - Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set)

        5. Absent Message
           - Message(Absent Messages)

        6. Flexible Numbering
           - Dial(Flexible Numbering)

        7. Account Code
           - Account Code(Account Codes)

        8. Special Carrier(International Call)
           - Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes)








System Data Programming Main Menu

        9. Timer
           - Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time)
           - Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time)
           - No Answer Time(Call Forwarding - No Answer Time)
           - Intercept Time(Intercept Time)
           - Pickup Dial Waiting Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time)
           - CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time)
           - CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time)
           - 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time)
           - Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time)
           - Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times)
           - Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time)
           - CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time)
           - Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time)
           - DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) (For KX-TD1232
             Only)
           - DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time)
           - Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times)
           - Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time)
           - TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time)


System Data Programming Main Menu

       10. Voice Mail
           - Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set)
           - Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set)

       11. Miscellaneous
           - Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type)
           - System Password(System Password)
           - User Password(User Password)
           - Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment)
           - Manager(Manager Extension Assignment)
           - Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment)
           - Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type)
           - SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing)
           - CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button)
           - Adjust Time(Adjust Time)
           - Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment)
           - Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection)
           - Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination)
           - Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set)
           - Charge Margin(Charge Margin)
           - DTA(DTA EXT No.)


System Data Programming Main Menu

           - PBX Code(PBX Code)
           - E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignmenet)

       12. FLT.EXT. DDI No.
           - Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation)

       13. Voice Mail Integration
           - VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment)
           - EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment)
           - EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment)

       14. UCD
           - UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number)
           - UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number)
           - UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence)
           - UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extebsion Number)

       15. Phantom
           - Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number)
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)



System Data Programming Main Menu

       16. Phantom DDI No.
           - Phantom DDI No.(Phantom DDI Number)

       17. System Time
           - System Time(Date and Time Set)

       18. Version
           - Version(ROM Version Display)

       19. ISDN Card













System Data Programming Main Menu

    4.  Toll Restriction Menu

        Assigns the data of Toll Restriction.

        1. TRS Deny
           - TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry)

        2. TRS Exception
           - TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Exception Excepted Code Entry)














System Data Programming Main Menu

    5.  ARS Menu

        Assigns the data of ARS.  The following features are assignable.

        1. ARS Mode/Time/Modify Data
           - Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode)
           - Time(ARS Time)
           - Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number)

        2. ARS Routing Plan
           - ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans)

        3. ARS Leading Digit
           - ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)









System Data Programming Main Menu

    6.  Aux. Ports Menu

        Assigns external features connected with DSHS.  The following features
        are assignable.

        1. Music & Paging
           - Hold Music No.(Music Source Use for Hold Music)
           - BGM No.(Music Source Use for BGM)
           - Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone)
           - Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - BGM(External Pager BGM)












System Data Programming Main Menu

        2. Administration & SMDR & MODEM
           - MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - MODEM TYPE(MODEM Standard) (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters)
           - SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode)
           - SMDR Duration Log Outgoings(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout)
           - SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout)
           - Format-Page Length(SMDR Format)
           - Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format)
           - SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)
           - SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           - SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           - SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           - SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)









System Data Programming Main Menu

        3. DISA (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment)
           - Security Mode(DISA Security Type)
           - Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection)
           - REC Time(Outgoing Message Time)
           - Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat)

        4. User Code (For KX-TD1232 Only)
           - Code(DISA/TIE user code)
           - COS(COS number)


    7.  Additional Function
        Assigns the added features.


    8.  Caller ID
        Assigns Caller ID feature.  The following features are assignable.
           - Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set)
           - Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set)



Disk File Management

    Manages the files in PC DB.

    <Operation>

    (1) Enter the number of the drive and the name of the directory.
        Press ENTER key.

    (2) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.

    (3) File names are displayed when the file extensions of them are ".DBD",
        ".DBE",".DBF",".DBG",".DBH" and ".DBI".
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBI" are the files of database
        of version 3.20 type.
        The files whose file extensions are ".DBA" are the files of ASCII
        for printing.








Disk File Management

    (4) - To load the files of database into the memory of the PC terminal
           1  Select the file by using Up or Down key and press F1(LOAD).
           2  When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is not
              in the memory, a message
              "Now loading system data" appears and loading starts.
              When you select the file with ".DBI" and it is already
              in the memory, a message
              "Old system data will be cleared OK ? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to load or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              When you press "Y" or "y", a message "Now loading system data"
              appears and loading starts.
              When it is completed, a message "System data loading completed"
              appears.
              If you select the file with ".DBA", an error message
              "No Data Base error" appears.








Disk File Management

    (5) - To convert database in the memory into the files of ASCII
           1  Press F2(ASCII) and a message
              "Enter File Name[              ]" appears.
           2  Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
              automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
           3  A message "Page Length[  ]" appears. Enter the length of
              the page and press ENTER key.
           4  A message "Now converting system data" appears and converting
              starts.
           5  When it is completed, a message "System data conversion completed"
              appears.












Disk File Management

    (6) - To delete files
           1 Select the file by using Up or Down key, and press F3(DELETE).
           2 A message "Are you sure? (Y/N)=>" appears.
              Press "Y" or "y" to delete, or "N" or "n" to cancel.
              Press F8(EXIT) to cancel and return to the initial screen.

    (7) - To save the database in the memory into files
           1 Press F7(SAVE) and a message
             "Enter File Name[        ], Comment[             ]" appears.
           2 Enter the name of the file without the file extension (as it is
             automatically attached to the name) and press ENTER key.
             Enter the comment and press ENTER key.
           3 A message "Now saving system data" appears and saving starts.
           4 When it is completed, a message "System data save completed"
             appears.

    (8) Press F5(P-PAGE) to return to the previous page.

    (9) Press F6(N-PAGE) to advance to the next page.

   (10) Press F8(EXIT) to return to the initial screen.


Disk File Management

    <Condition>

    (1) When you press F2(ASCII) or F7(SAVE) and there are not any files in
        PC DB, an error message appears.



















DSHS Management Main Menu

    When you program the system data in Batch Editing Mode, you must load
    or save the data to or from DSHS. You can also diagnose cards or lines
    of DSHS.  You can select the operation in this menu screen.

    1. System Data SAVE(DSHS=>PC Memory)

       Saves the system data from DSHS to PC Memory.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program, and the data already exist in PC DB
           file, a message "Old System Data will be cleared.  OK?(Y/N)" appears.
           Press "Y" or "y" to be cleared.
           Press "N" or "n" or ESC key to cancel.
           Press F8(EXIT)to cancel and return to the initial screen.








DSHS Management Main Menu

    2. System Data LOAD(PC Memory=>DSHS)

       Loads the system data from PC Memory to DSHS.

       <Condition>

       (1) When you select this program but the data do not exist in PC DB file,
           an error message appears.

    3. Test (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Diagnoses cards and lines of DSHS.  The following tests are available.

       1. DTMF G/R Test              6. Caller ID Test
       2. EXT Card Test              7. SIC Test
       3. CO Card Test               8. PT Test
       4. DISA Card Test             9. ISDN SO Card Test
       5. DPH, RMT, CONF, Test





Test Entry

    <Condition>

    You cannot execute testing through Jack No. 01. If you connect the modem to
    Jack No. 01, please reconnect it to another jack.



















Test Menu

    <Explanation>

   (1) BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 in Configuration indicate the types of the cards
       in order of being installed and the numbers are automatically attached
       to the cards.  All tests are executed according to the numbers.
       If the cards are not installed, BAC 1/2/3 and EXP 1/2/3 are displayed
       as blanks.

   (2) OP1/2/3/4 indicate DISA, RMT, DPH and SIC cards when they are installed.

   (3) The system (Master or Slave) which is now tested is displayed
       in the screen.











DTMF G/R Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 2) or * (a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the function of receiving DTMF of an extension card.
    -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
     passes through CODEC and reaches the DTMF receiver in an extension card.

    <Condition>

    All extensions connected with the extension cards must be on-hook
    or disconnected to reflect the signal at the balance network circuit.

EXT Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.












EXT Card Test

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the digital path of an extension card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through the telephone interface circuit in the extension
        port M of the extension card N and turns back to TWS.
        (The telephone interface circuit turns the signal back inside.)
        Then the signal passes through the port 1 of CO card 1 and
        the Diagnosis path, and reaches the DTMF receiver through the extension
        port 1 of the extension card 1.

   (2) Examines the data communication circuit of digital proprietary telephones
       of the extension cards.
       -The telephone interface circuit is automatically assigned to turn
        the HDLC data back to HDLC Communication Circuit.
        The feature is examined as mentioned.
       -The test is executed from port 1 to port 8.






CO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *( a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the path of CO cards.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card.
        It passes through CODEC in the CO port M of the CO Card N.
        (It is reflected at the balance network circuit.)
        The signal is turned back to TWS, passes through the port 1
        of CO card 1 and reaches the DTMF receiver through the Diagnosis
        path and the extension port 1 of the extension card 1.

    <Condition>

   (1) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the extensions
       connected with the extension card 1 must be on-hook or disconnected.


CO Card Test

   (2) To reflect the signal at the balance network circuit, the CO lines
       must be disconnected from CO cards.
   (3) Examines the CPC detection function, sending the DTMF and the pulse dial
       function, and the BELL detection function  of CO ports.

    1) The extension port is turned into the diagnostic mode.
    2) The CO port M is turned into the diagnostic mode .
    3) DIAL is switched on and an electric current is sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the port.
    4) The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
       received on the DTMF receiver in  the extension card.
    5) The Pulse is sent from and received on the HOOK/PULSE receiving circuit
       in the extension port.
    6) DIAL is switched off and an electric current is not sent to the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit.
    7) The Bell is sent from the extension port and received on  the BELL/CPC
       detection circuit in the CO port M.
    8) The CO port and the extension port quit the diagnosis mode.
    9) The test mentioned above is executed from the port 1 to port 8
       of the CO card 1 and from the port 1 to port 4 of the CO card 2.



DISA Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the upper and lower paths, the DTMF repeater function, and
       the Tone detection function of DTMF circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and reciverd on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.




DISA Card Test
    2) DTMF repeater test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator, passes through
        the DTMF receiver and the DTMF generator in the DISA card and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the following order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.
   (2) Examines the upper and lower paths, the OGM recording and playing back
       function and the Tone detection function of OGM circuit in the DISA card.
    1) CO-CO path test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator and received on
        the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the fllowing order.
    2) OGM test
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card
        and recorded in OGM. The signal is played back from OGM and received
        on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
    3) Tone detection test
       -The call progress tone is sent in the fllowing order and the tone
        detection circuit is examined.


DPH,RMT,CONF Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the card (1 through 4) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines ports of the DPH card.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card and
        received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.
       -The signal is sent in the following order.
   (2) Examines the loopback on the RMT card.
       -The digital and analog serial data are looped back in MODEM IC.




DPH,RMT,CONF Test

   (3) Examines the path in the CONF trunks.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through the CONF trunk and reaches the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.

    <Condition>

    Doorphones must be disconnected from the Doorphone ports to reflect
    the signal at the balance network circuit.














Caller ID Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the CO card (1 or 2) or *(a wild card character)
       and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

    Examines the Caller ID function of CO cards.
    -The serial interface circuit in the Caller ID card is assigned to turn
     the serial data back inside and received them on the circuit.






SIC Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.

    <Note>

    The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
    in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the SIC path.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator in the CPU card,
        passes through SIC path, reflected at TSW of another system,
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card.






PT Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Enter the number of the extension card (1 through 4) or *( a wild card
       character) and then press ENTER key.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to TEST Menu screen.

    <Note>

   (1) A proprietary telephone is abbreviated to PT in the screen.
   (2) The System (Master or Slave) which is now being tested is displayed
       in the screen.

    <Explanation>

   (1) Examines the normal path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in an analog proprietary telephone and received on the DTMF receiver
        in the extension card.




PT Test

   (2) Examines the OHCA path of analog proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the OHCA path
        in an analog proprietary telephone, passes through CODEC and TSW
        in OHCA and the CO port 1 of CO card 1, and received on the DTMF
        receiver in the extension card 1.
   (3) Examines the normal path of digital proprietary telephones.
       -The DTMF signal is sent from the DTMF generator to the normal path
        in a digital proprietary telephone, passes through TSW in the CPU card
        and is received on the DTMF receiver in the extension card 1.














ISDN SO Card Test

    <Operation>

   (1) Press ENTER key to proceed.
   (2) The result is displayed by OK or NG.
   (3) Press F8 (EXIT) to return to Test Menu screen.


















DSHS Connect/Disconnect

    When you program the system data in Interactive Editing Mode, you must
    connect DSHS with a PC terminal. There are two types of connection, RS-232C
    Connect and MODEM Connect for the KX-TD1232 and one type, RS-232C connect
    for the KX-TD816



















RS-232C Connect

    Assigns the communication parameters of RS-232C connection.

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters, connect the DSHS with Port 1 or 2 of
        the PC terminal by the RS-232C cable.

    (2) If you want to change the parameters, use TAB key, the cursor keys or
        ENTER key to move the cursor.
        The defaults of the DSHS are as the following.

           Baud Rate = 9600
           NL Code = CR+LF
           Parity = Mark
           Word Length = 8 bits
           Stop Bit = 1 bit
           Password = 1234

    (3) After editing the data, enter the password and press F7(CONNECT).




RS-232C Connect

    (4) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS.
        DSHS Connecting Status turns into "On-line(RS-232C)".

    (5) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.

    <Condition>

    (1) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.












RS-232C Connect

    (2) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7(CONNECT) again.

           Port No.      1 or 2
           Baud Rate     150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Word Length   7 or 8 bits
           Parity        None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           Stop Bit      1 bit or 2 bits
           Password      0 through 9     4, 5, 6 or 7 digits













MODEM Connect

    Modem

    To connect the DSHS with IBM-PC from a remote site, use a Hayes compatible
    modem(AT command).
    The RS-232C cable is necessary to connect the DSHS with an external modem.

    (1) The modem which is used to connect with DSHS must be able to use one of
        the following standard;
           CCITT V.21, CCITT V.22, CCITT V.22bis, Bell 103, Bell 212A.

    (2) The modem must be also able to use the following AT command to assign
        the modem from PC terminal.
           Z=Reset                      F=Full Duplex Mode
           D=Dial                       N=MNP movement*
           E=Echo back                  B=Communication standard
           H=Line hook                  +++=Escape
           V=Result code                S=Register assignment
           &C=DCD control*





MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If the modem cannot use the command mentioned above, it may work
        improperly.

    (2) The commands marked * are necessary to detect the disconnection from
        lines automatically.
















MODEM Connect

    <Operation>

    (1) Before assigning the parameters,
        install the Modem card(Hayes compatible modem) in the PC terminal,
        or connect the external Modem(Hayes compatible modem) with the COM port
        1 or 2 of the PC terminal.
        Connects the card or the Modem with a CO line after that.

    (2) After selecting "2. MODEM Connect", the screen above appears.

    (3) - Automatic call from the Modem

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Dial Mode,
              Dial Number,
              Password




MODEM Connect

           2. After editing the data, press F7(CONNECT).
              The PC terminal detects the carrier signal from the DSHS and
              starts communicating with it.

    (4) - Manual call from a telephone and access the Modem card.

           1. Assigns the following parameters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with a CO line and call the DSHS from it.

           3. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press F7(CONNECT)
              and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (5) - Manual call from a telephone and access the external Modem.

           1. Assigns the folowing paramters.
              COM Port,
              Interface,
              ORG CON Type,
              Password

           2. Connects the telephone with the Modem and set the switch of the
              Modem to the "Telephone" position.

           3. Call the DSHS from the telephone.

           4. When you hear the carrier signal from the DSHS, press the data
              communication button of the Modem and then press F7(CONNECT) of
              the PC terminal and place the handset.







MODEM Connect

    (6) A message "DSHS Connection completed(DSHS ID=> KX-TDxxxx)" appears
        when the PC terminal is connected with the DSHS. DSHS Connecting Status
        turns into "On-line(MODEM)".

    (7) Press F8(EXIT) to return to DSHS Connect/Disconnect Main Menu screen.


















MODEM Connect

    <Condition>

    (1) An error message appears when something is wrong with the line.
        Check the line and then press F7 again.

    (2) If the password is wrong, an error message appears after pressing
        F7(CONNECT).
        Reenter the correct one and press F7 again.

    (3) The following parameters are fixed in the default data.
           NL Code=CR+LF












MODEM Connect

    <Note>

    (1) If you need the initial data of the Modem, enter the command in MODEM
        Init field and the data are sent from the Modem.

           COM Port No.  1 or 2    1 digit
           Interface     CCITT V.21(300 BPS), CCITT V.22(1200 BPS),
                         CCITT V.22bis(2400 BPS)
                         BELL 103(300 BPS),   BELL 212A(1200 BPS)
           ORG CON Type  Auto or Manual
           NL Code       CR+LF or CR
           Dial Mode     Tone or Pulse
           MODEM Init.   0 through 9  A through Z  a through z
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Dial Number   0 through 9  * # - P(Pause) T(Tone)
                         Maximum 30 digits
           Password      0 through 9  4, 5, 6 or 7 digits






CO Line Setting 1

    1. CON(CO Line Connection Assignment) [400]

       Assigns connecting states of CO lines.
           Y : Connect   N : Disconnect

    2. TRG(CO Line Group Assignment) [401]

       Assigns individual CO lines to one CO line group.
           1 through 8

    3. DIAL(Dial Mode Selection) [402]

       Assigns the dial mode to each CO line.
           D : DTMF, P : Pulse Dial, C : Call Block

    4. DTMF(DTMF Time) [404]

       Sets the DTMF time of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned DTMF.
           80 or 160



CO Line Setting 1

    5. PULSE PPS(Pulse Speed Selection) [403]

       Sets the pulse speed of CO lines.
       It is available when the dial mode is assigned PULSE.
           10 or 20

    6. CID(Caller ID Assignment) [406] (NL)

       Enables Caller ID feature for the CO lines to which Caller ID
       Service is offered by a Central Office by contract.
           Y : Identify or N : Not identify

    7. CPC Detection Mode(CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set) [405] (SP,SA)

       Assigns the expected minimum duration of the CPC Signal on
       incoming CO calls. If this is programmed, the system disconnects
       the line when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable, 20ms,  100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SP)
           Disable, 100ms, 200ms, 300ms, 400ms, 500ms, 600ms (SA)




CO Line Setting 1

    8. CPC Detection Out(CPC Signal Detection Outgoing Set) [415] (SA)

       Enables or disables CPC Signal Detection during the time between
       the originated CO call and the established CO call. If this is
       enabled, the system disconnects the line with the time set in
       "CPC Signal Detection Incoming Set" when the CPC Signal is detected.
           Disable or Enable

    9. DIL 1:1 EXT No. Day/Night(Direct In Line Extension - Day/Night) [407,408]

       Assigns an extension for a DIL 1:1 destination during day time or night
       time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9










CO Line Setting 1


   10. Pay-Tone(Pay-Tone Assignment) [423]

           Enable or Disable


   11. Dial Tone Detect(Dial Tone Detection Set) [416] (SP)

           Enable or Disable














CO Line Setting 2

    1. Telephone Number(ISDN Line Number Assignment) [418]

       Assigns your telephone number of the ISDN network line. Your
       telephone number is informed to the called party with the CLIP
       (Calling Line Information Presentation) feature offered by the
       ISDN network service.
           0 through 9     Maximum 16 digits

    2. Name(CO Line Name Set) [417]

       Used to set names to CO lines. The preset name is shown on a
       display proprietary telephone when an incoming CO call is placed
       to the telephone.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters








CO Line Setting 2

    3. ISDN CLIR Send(ISDN Outgoing CLIR Service Assignment) [419]

       Assigns whether is ISDN CLIR(Calling Line Information Restriction)
       servive is enabled or disabled for outgoing outside calls. If disabled,
       the subscriber's number of your system is informed to the called party.
           Disable or Enable

    4. DDI Service(ISDN DDI Service Assignment) [420]

       Enable or disables ISDN DDI service per CO line.
           Disable or Enable












CO Line Groups (TRG)

    1. Intercept EXT No. Day/Night(Intercept Extension - Day/Night) [409,410]

       Assigns extensions for destinations of intercept routing during day time
       or night time.
           Disable or EXT[    ] (After selecting EXT[    ])     0 through 9

    2. Flash Time(Flash Time) [413]

       Sets the length of the Flash Time.
           No, 80, 96, 112, 200, 300, 400, 500, 600, 700, 800, 900, 1000, 1100
           or 1200
           No, 80, 96, 112 or 200 (SP)

    3. Pause Time(Pause Time) [412]

       Sets the length of the Pause Time.
           1.5, 2.5, 3.5, or 4.5






CO Line Groups (TRG)

    4. DSC Time(Disconnect Time) [414]

       Sets the length of the disconnecting time.
           1.5 or 4.0
           0.8 or 1.5 (SA)

    5. PBX Access(Host PBX Access Codes) [411]

       Assigns the Host PBX access codes.
           1 through 9     *(a wild card character)

    6. TBL No.(TIE Table Number Assignment) [431] (CE,SA)

       Assigns table number to each CO line group.
           1 through 4     Blank(Not stored)








ISDN Internal/External

    1. Line Type(ISDN Port Type) [424]

       Assigns the ISDN port type.
           CO or Extension

    2. L1 Mode(ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode) [425]

       Assigns the ISDN Layer 1 Active Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    3. L2 Mode(ISDN Data Link Mode) [427]

       Assigns the ISDN Data Link Mode.
           Call or Permanent

    4. Access Mode(ISDN Extension Configuration) [426]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Configuration.
           P-P or P-MP




ISDN Internal/External

    5. TEI Assign(ISDN TEI Mode) [428]

       Assigns the ISDN TEI Mode.
          Fix[xx](00 through 63) or Automatic

    6. MSN Service(ISDN Extension MSN) [429]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension MSN.
           Enable or Disable

    7. Extension Tone(ISDN Extension Progress Tone) [430]

       Assigns the ISDN Extension Progress Tone.
           Enable or Disable









CO Line Table

    1. Incoming(TIE Incoming Assignment) [432] (CE,SA)

       Assigns incoming method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    2. Outgoing(TIE Outgoing Assignment) [433] (CE,SA)

       Assigns outgoing method, immediate or wink, to each table in
       accordance with the service of your central office.
           Immediate or Wink

    3. RMV(Subscriber Number Removed Digit) [434] (CE,SA)

       Assigns received digits of subscriber number to each table.
       Besides, remved digits from the received digits can be programmed.
       In this case, digits are removed from the beginning of the received
       digits.

       Number of digits to be deleted: 0 through 6



CO Line Table

    4. Add Dial(Added Number) [435] (CE,SA)

       Assigns added number to the subscriber number which is determined
       in program "RMV" to make the final number Removed as the extension
       number. Note that digits are inserted at the beginning of the number.
           1 through 4         4 digits(max.)

    5. Wink Timeout(Wink Time Out Assignment) [436] (CE,SA)

       Outgoing method can be set to wink mode in program "Outgoing
       Assignment". This program sets the time the system waits for
       the confirmation wink signal after CO line is seized in accordance with
       the service of your central office.
       The system disconnects the CO line when time-out expires.
           0 through 127 (x64 milliseconds is the actual time)








TIE TRG Setting

    1. CO-TIE XFER(CO-to-TIE Transfer) [437] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the incoming outside call to TIE
       line on a CO line group basis. This restriction is applied to the
       following: 1)TIE call using DISA; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    2. TIE-CO XFER(TIE-to-CO Transfer) [438] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to CO line on a CO
       line group group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)outside call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to CO line;
       3)Call Transfer to CO line.
           Enable or Disable








TIE TRG Setting

    3. TIE-TIE XFER(TIE-to-TIE Transfer) [439] (CE,SA)

       Enables or disables transferring the TIE calls to TIE line on a CO
       line group basis. This restriction is applied to the following:
       1)TIE call through other PBX; 2)Call Forwarding to TIE line;
       3)Call Transfer to TIE line.
           Enable or Disable

    4. TIE SECURITY(TIE Security Type) [440] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the security mode for TIE calls. There are two modes:
       Non Security and Trunk Security(CO line security). Non Security
       mode allows the caller to access a CO line without dialing a TIE
       user code. Trunk Security mode requires the caller to enter a TIE
       User Code assigned in program [811] "DISA/TIE User Codes"
       before making a TIE call.
           Non or Trunk






TIE TRG Setting

    5. LINE HUNT(Line Hunting Sequence) [441] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the hunting sequence of idles, seizes from the smallest
       to the largest line number or vice versa in a CO line group, on a CO
       line group basis.
           Small->Large or Large->Small

















TIE Port Setting

    1. Voice Path Type(Voice Path Type) [442] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the voice path type on a CO line basis.
           2 WIRE or 4 WIRE

    2. Voice Level(TX)(Voice Level(Transmit)) [443] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line port basis. This
       program is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB













TIE Port Setting

    3. Voice Level(RX)(Voice Level(Receive)) [444] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the transmitted voice level on a CO line basis. This program
       is valid only when the voice path type is set to "4 WIRE."
           -6dB, -3dB, 0dB and +3dB

    4. Receive Dial(TIE Receive Dial) [445] (CE,SA)

       Assigns whether the system receive the TIE dial numbers on a CO
       line basis. If "NO" is selected, the dialed number is treated as a
       local dial number and send to DIL 1:1 or DIL 1:N.
           YES or NO











TIE Routing Table

    1. Dial(TIE line access code) [340] (CE,SA)

       TIE line routing table can be programed. This table is
       referenced by the system to identify the CO line route, when an
       extension usesr made a TIE call.
       A routing pattern appropriate for each call is decided for the first
       three digits(except the TIE line access code) of the dialed number.
           1 through 3 digits

    2. Del(TIE Modify Removed Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           0 through 4








TIE Routing Table

    3. Add(TIE Modify Added Digit) [341] (CE,SA)

       Assigns removed and added digits of received digits of TIE call.
       In this case, digits are removed and added from the beginning of the
       dialed digits.
           4 digits max.

    4. Group(CO line group hunt sequence number) [340] (CE,SA)

       This program assigns the TIE line access code and CO line group
       hunt sequence.
           1 through 8 (5 entry max.)











Station Setting

    1. EXT(Extension Number Set) [003]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(Extension Name Set) [004]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. XDP(Extra Device Port) [600]

       EXtra Device Port(XDP) allows a single line telephone(SLT) to be
       connected to the same jack as a digital proprietary telephone(DPT).
       This program assigns which jacks are XDP. The SLT and DPT of
       the programmed jack work as independent extensions.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable




Station Setting

    4. CHG(Charge Verification Assignment) [122]

           Y : Enable or N : Disable

    5. EXG(Extension Group Assignment) [602]

       Assigns individual extensions to one extension group.
           1 through 8

    6. Doorphone Day/Night(Doorphone Ringing Assignment - Day/Night) [607,608]

       Assigns extensions to answer a doorphone during day mode or night mode.
           Y : Enable or N : Disable










Station Setting

    7. Charge Limit(Charge Limitation Assignment) [010]

           0 through 59999

    8. DDI No. Trans(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [610]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits

    9. LCS Mode(Live Call Screening Recording Mode Assignment) [610]

       Assigns whether to close the mailbox or to keep recording
       the conversation after the call is intercepted.
           Stop Rec or Keep Rec








COS & Mailbox ID

    1. COS Pri/Sec(Class of Service) [601]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8

    2. Mailbox ID(Voice Mail Access Codes) [609]

       Assigns the access codes for Voice-Mail device.
           0 through 9               * # P or p(Pause)

    3. Incoming Display(Incoming Call Display) [612]

       Allows you to select between three display types when an incoming
       call is received.
           Caller,CO Line or DDI








CO line Outgoing

    1. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment - Day/Night) [605,606]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable


















DIL 1:N

    1. DIL 1:N Day/Night(Direct In Line 1:N Extension and Delayed Ringing
       - Day/Night) [603,604]

       Assigns the state of DIL 1:N to each extension in day mode or in
       night mode.
           D : Disable, 0 : Immediate, 1 : 1 Rings, 3 : 3 Rings, 6 : 6 Rings
           N : No Rings
















ISDN Internal 1

    1. EXT(ISDN Extension Number Set) [012]

       Assigns an extension number to each extension.
           0 through 9

    2. Name(ISDN Extension Name Set) [013]

       Assigns a user's name to each extension.
           0 through 9,    A through Z, a through z.
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )
           Maximum 10 character

    3. Charge Limit(ISDN Port Charge Limitation Assignment) [014]

           0 through 59999








ISDN Internal 2

    1. COS Pri/Sec(ISDN Class of Service) [613]

       Assigns the Class of Service number to each extension.
           1 through 8


    2. CO line OG(Outgoing Permitted CO Line Assignment for ISDN Extension
                                                         - Day/Night) [614,615]

       Assigns CO line groups with which extension users can make outside calls
       in day mode or in night mode.
           Y : Enable              N : Disable











Flexible CO Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible CO Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible CO buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       S-CO(Single-CO)           : 01 through 24(CO line number)(for KX-TD1232)
                                 : 01 through 08(CO line number)(for KX-TD816)
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       G-CO(Group-CO)            : 1 through 8 (CO line group number)
       L-CO(Loop-CO)             : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)




Flexible CO Keys

       LOGIN/LOGOUT              : None
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       TONE(Ringer Frequency)    : 1 through 8 (ring tone type number)















Flexible PF Keys

    1. Flexible Keys(Flexible Button Assignment) [005]

       Assigns the use of the flexible buttons of the extension telephones
       within the system.
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)

    2. Name

       Assigns names
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    3. SPD(Station Speed Dialing) & P-DL(Pickup Dialing)
           16 digits max. (Telephone number)

DSS

    1. DSS(DSS Console Assignment) [007]

       Assigns the feature of DSS buttons of DSS consoles.
           1 through 8 (for KX-TD1232)      1 through 4 (for KX-TD816)

            Button Code                       Parameter
       DSS                       : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       One-Touch                 : 16 digits max. (Telephone number)
       MSG WAIT(Message Waiting) : None (for DSS key only)
       FWD/DND                   : None
       SAVE                      : None
       ACCOUNT                   : None
       CONF(Conference)          : None
       VTR(Voice Mail Transfer)  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-REC                  : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       2WAY-TRNS                 : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)
       LCS(Live Call Screening)  : None
       LCS CANCEL                : None
       ALERT                     : None
       PHANTOM                   : 2 through 4 digits (Extension number)



Day/Night

    1. Mode(Day/Night Service Switching Mode) [101]

       Assigns the method to alternate with the day and night modes.
           Manual or Auto

    2. Time(Day/Night Service Starting Time) [102]

       Sets the starting time when you  select the automatic switching mode for
       day/night service.
           Disable or [  ] AM / PM













Class of Service

    1. TRS-Level Day/Night(Toll Restriction Level - Day/Night) [500,501]

       Assigns the level of Toll Restriction during day or night mode.
           1 through 8

    2. Durait Limit(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Limit) [502]

       Assigns the duration time of an originated outside call to be limited or
       not.
           Disable or Enable

    3. TRNSF to CO(Call Transfer to CO Line) [503]

       Assigns transferring to CO to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable

    4. CALL FWD to CO(Call Forwarding to CO Line) [504]

       Assigns the Call Forwarding to outside to be made or not.
           Disable or Enable



Class of Service

    5. Busy OVRID(Executive Busy Override) [505]

       Assigns Busy Override Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    6. Busy OVRID Deny(Executive Busy Override Deny) [506]

       Assigns the Busy Override to be denied or not.
           Disable or Enable

    7. DND OVRID(Do Not Disturb Override) [507]

       Assigns the Do Not Disturb Service to be valid or not.
           Disable or Enable

    8. Account Code(Account Code Entry Mode) [508]

       Assigns the mode of entering the account codes.
           Option, Verify-All, Verify-Toll




Emergency Dial

    1. Number(Emergency Dial Number Set) [009]

           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)                           16 digits



















Speed Dial

    1. Name(System Speed Dialing Name Set) [002]

       Assigns names of destinations stored as the speed dialing numbers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  10 characters

    2. Number(System Speed Dialing Number Set) [001]

       Assigns telephone numbers for system speed dialing.
           0 through 9     * # -   P or p(Pause)   Maximum
           F or f(FLASH)   S or s (SECRET)         24 digits












Absent Message

    1. Message(Absent Messages) [008]

       Assigns the Absent Messages.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  16 characters


















Flexible Numbering

    1. Dial(Flexible Numbering) [100]

       Assigns dialing numbers of each feature.
           0 through 9     * #



















Account Code

    1. Account Code(Account Codes) [105]

       Assigns the Account Codes for Verified mode.
           0 through 9



















Special Carrier

    1. Special Carrier(Special Carrier Access Codes) [311]
       International Call (SP)

       Assigns the Special Carrier numbers.
           0 through 9  *(means a wild card character)


















Timer

    1. Hold Recall Time(Hold Recall Time) [200]

       Sets the Hold Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    2. Transfer Recall Time(Transfer Recall Time) [201]

       Sets the Transfer Recall Time.
           0 through 9

    3. No Answer Time(Call Forwarding No Answer Time) [202]

       Sets the Call Forwarding No Answer Time.
           0 through 9

    4. Intercept Time(Intercept Time) [203]

       Sets the time out for the Intercept Routing No Answer.
           0 through 9




Timer

    5. Pickup Dial Waitimg Time(Pickup Dial Waiting Time) [204]

       Sets the waiting time for Pickup Dial.
           0 through 9

    6. CO Call Duration Time(Extension-to-CO Line Call Duration Time) [205]

       Sets the duration time allowed for a conversation with an outside party.
           0 through 9

    7. CO-CO Call Duration Time(CO-to-CO Call Duration Time) [206]

       Assigns the duration time allowed for a conversation between two outside
       parties.
           0 through 9








Timer

    8. 1st Digit Time(First Digit Time) [207]

       Sets the maximum time allowed between the start of CO dial tone and the
       first digit dialed on an outgoing CO call. If an extension user fails to
       dial any digits this during this time, the DTMF receiver is released.
           0 through 9

    9. Inter Digit Time(Inter Digit Time) [208]

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between digits on an outgoing
       toll call. If an extension user fails to dial any digits during this
       time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer applies until the
       Toll Restriction check is completed.
           0 through 9









Timer

   10. Automatic Redial Repeat Times(Automatic Redial Repeat Times) [209]

       Sets the repeated time of Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   11. Automatic Redial Interval Time(Automatic Redial Interval Time) [210]

       Sets the interval time for Automatic Redial. (CE,SA)
           0 through 9

   12. CO Dial Starting Time(Dial Start Time) [211]

       Sets the time taken for the system to start dialing after an outside
       line is seized.
           0 through 9








Timer

   13. Call Duration Count Start Time(Call Duration Count Start Time) [212]

       Sets the number of seconds the system waits between the end of
       dialing and the start of the SMDR timer for outgoing toll calls.
       When the system has sent out all the digits to the central office and
       this timer expires, the system starts counting the call. A display
       telephone shows the elapsed time of the call. The starting time and
       the total duration of a call are recorded in the SMDR record.
           0 through 9

   14. DISA Delayed Answer Time(DISA Delayed Answer Time) [213]
       (For KX-TD1232 Only)

       Sets the time taken to answer incoming calls by DISA feature.
           0 through 9

   15. DISA Prolong Time(DISA Prolong Time) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [214]

       Sets the prolonged time for a conversation between two outside parties
       by DISA feature.
           0 through 9


Timer

   16. MW Interval Time(MW Ringing Interval Time) [216]

       Sets the interval time for MW Ringing.
           0 through 9

   17. Alarm Repeat Times(Alarm Repeat Times) [217]

       Sets the repeated time of Alarm.
           0 through 9

   18. Alarm Interval Time(Alarm Interval Time) [218]

       Sets the interval time for Alarm.
           0 through 9









Timer

   19. TIE First/Inter Digit Time(TIE First/Inter Digit Time) [220] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the maximum time allowed between the start of dial tone
       and the first digit dialed(First Digit Time) and between digits
       (Inter Digit Time) on an TIE call. If an extension user fails to dial any
       digits during this time, the DTMF receiver is released. This timer
       applies until the Toll Restriction check is completed.
           3 through 30















Voice Mail

    1. Extension Status(VM Status DTMF Set) [113]

       Sets the DTMF signals transmitted to your Voice Processing
       System(VPS) to inform the VPS of the VPS ports states quickly:
       The following signals are sent to the VPS with the assigned DTMF
       signals:
          RBT (ringback tone): This signal is sent when calling an extension.
          BT (busy tone)     : This is sent when the called extension is busy.
          ROT (reorder tone) : This is sent when the dialed number is invalid.
          DND (DND tone)     : This is sent when the other extension has
                               DND assigned.
          Answer             : This is sent when the other extension
                               answers the call.
          Disconnect         : This is sent when the other extension
                               hangs up.
          Confirm (confirmation tone):
                               This is sent when the feature number for
                               "Message Waiting Lamp" is valid.
          FWD VM RBT (FWD to VM ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).



Voice Mail

          FWD VM BT (FWD to VM busy tone):
                               This is sent when the called extension
                               has set Call Forwarding to VPS.
          FWD EXT RBT (FWD to extension ringback tone):
                               Not available(reserved).
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE)

    2. Voice Mail Command(VM Command DTMF Set) [114]

       Sets the DTMF command signals transmitted to your Voice
       Processing System(VPS). There are four commands available:
       Leave Message; Get Message; Automated Attendant Service; Voice
       Mail Service. These commands are used in the following ways:
       (A) If your VPS is used for Voice Mail(VM) Service
       (1) Call Forwarding / Intercept Routing to Voice Mail
       If a call is forwarded to the VPS, your system will send a mailbox
       number to the VM port. This allows the caller to leave a message
       without knowing the mailbox number.
       -Required entries(selections):
        LV-MSG(Leave Message): This command is transmitted to a
        VM port if a call is forwarded or intercepted and rerouted to the port.


Voice Mail

        AA-SVC(Automated Attendant Service): If AA Service is set to
        "Start" in Additional Function, SYS1 Bit16, the "AA-SVC" command is
        sent to a VM port if an incoming CO call is answered by the VM port
       -Other programming required(program addresses):
       (2) Hearing the message at the extension
       If the VPS receives a message and lights the MESSAGE button
       indicator of the concerned telephone, the telephone user can hear
       the message by pressing the MESSAGE button.
       -Required entries(selections):
        GETMSG(Get Message): This command is transmitted to a VM
        port when the message receiver presses the MESSAGE button.
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted preceding the "GETMSG" command above.
        This is effective to switch to VM port when an AA port lights the
        MESSAGE indicator.
       -Other programming required(program address):







Voice Mail

       (B) If your VPS is used for Automated Attendant(AA) Service
       An AA port answers an incoming CO call to provide AA services,
       such as call transfer, receiving a message.
       -Required entries(selections):
        VM-SVC(Voice Mail Service): The "VM-SVC" command is a
        code transmitted before "LV-MSG" code if Operator transfers a
        call to an extension and then it is forwarded to an AA port so that
        the AA port can be switched to VM port temporarily.
       -Other programming required(program address):
           0 through 9     * # P or p(PAUSE) H or h(Home Position)













Miscellaneous

    1. Expansion Card Type Master/Slave(Expansion Card Type) [109]

       Assigns the type of Expansion Card for Master or Slave DSHS.

           EXP1: Expansion card 1 (Bottom)
           EXP2: Expansion card 2 (Middle)
           EXP3: Expansion card 3 (Top)

           EXT1,2: Optional Extension card 1,2
           COT: Optional CO card
           S1,2: Optional ISDN card(S1:KX-TD280,S2:KX-TD286)
           A1,2: Optional KX-TD174 card(CE,SA,SP)
           EM: Optional KX-TD184 card(CE,SA)

    2. System Password(System Password) [107]

       Assigns a password for entering into system programming from
       a proprietary telephone or a remote terminal.
           0 through 9




Miscellaneous

    3. User Password(User Password) [125]

       Assigns a password for entering into charge from a proprietary
       telephone.
           0 through 9

    4. Operator-1/-2(Operator Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Operator-1 or Operator-2.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)

    5. Manager(Manager Extension Assignment) [006]

       Assigns Jack No. connected with Manager which can enter into system
       programming.
           Disable or Jack [  ] (After selecting Jack [  ])
           01 through 64 (for KX-TD1232)    01 through 16 (for KX-TD816)





Miscellaneous

    6. Local Access(Automatic Access CO Line Group Assignment) [103]

       Assigns CO line groups in the preferential order for Automatic Access.
           1 through 8

    7. Call Hunting(Station Hunting Type) [106]

       Assigns the Station Hunting type on an extension group basis.
           D : Disable, T : Terminate, C : Circular, A : Automated Attendant,
           V : Voice Mail, U : UCD

    8. SPD TRS Override(TRS Override for System Speed Dialing) [300]

       Assigns to enable or disable to restrict calls made by SPD.
           Disable or Enable

    9. CO Auto-Hold by Push DSS-Key(One-Touch Transfer by DSS Button) [108]

       Assigns to enable or disable to hold an outside call automatically by
       pressing a DSS button during the outside call.
           Disable or Enable


Miscellaneous

   10. Adjust Time(Adjust Time) [115]

       Sets the time to adjust the data between the system of Master DSHS and
       Slave DSHS.
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

   11. Hotel Application(Hotel Application Assignment) [124]

           Disable or Enable

   12. Charge Display Type(Charge Display Selection) [120]

           Meter or Charge

   13. Charge Denomi(Assignment Denomination) [121]

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  2 characters





Miscellaneous

   14. Charge ID code(Charge Verificatino ID Code Set) [123]

           0 through 9

   15. Charge Margin(Charge Margin) [011]

           0 through 999

   16. DTA(DTA EXT No.) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for DTA.
           0 through 9











Miscellaneous

   17. PBX Code(PBX Code) [128] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the PBX Code as your location number if the "PBX Code
       method" is employed for the Tie Line Network calling.
           1 through 3 digits

   18. E&M Signal(E&M Signal Assignment) [129] (CE,SA)

       Assigns the E&M signal. There are three signals available:
       CONTINUOUS: Continuous E&M(Wink/Immediate)
       PULSED ANS: Pulsed E&M with Answer Signal(Wink only)
       PULSED NO ANS: Pulsed E&M without Answer Signal(Wink only)
           PULSED ANS, PULSED NO ANS and CONTINUOUS










FLT.EXT. DDI No.

    1. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [611]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits


















Voice Mail Integration

    1. VM Port No.(Voice Mail Number Assignment) [117]

       Assigns the jack number corresponding to voice mail port for data
       transmission to the Voice Processing System.
           KX-TD1232 Master 02 through 32        2 digits
                     Slave  33 through 64

    2. EXT(Voice Mail Extension Number Assignment) [118]

       Assigns the extension number for voice mail number. These numbers
       can be used the same way extension numbers are used for station access.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    3. EXG(Voice Mail Extension Group Assignment) [119]

       Assigns each voice mail number to an extension group number.
           1 through 8           1 digit






UCD

    1. UCD Overflow Extension Number(UCD Overflow Extension Number) [126]

       Assigns the destination which the call is transferred to when all
       extensions in the UCD group are busy.
           0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. UCD Time Table Number(UCD Time Table Number) [126]

       The Time Table number of the overflow extension must be assigned as well.
           1 through 4













UCD

    3. UCD Time Table Sequence(UCD Time Table Sequence) [127]

       Assigns the queuing sequence in the UCD time table. The queuing
       sequences are as follows:
           S1    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 1
           S2    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 2
           S3    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 3
           S4    : Sends the DISA outgoing message 4
           TR    : Transfers to the overflow extension
           RT    : Return to top of the sequence
           1T    : Timer - 16 seconds
           2T    : Timer - 32 seconds
           3T    : Timer - 48 seconds
           4T    : Timer - 64 seconds
           Blank : Disconnects

    4. UCD Group Extension Number(UCD Group Extension Number) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for UCD Group.
           0 through 9



Phantom

    1. Phantom Extension Number(Phantom Extension Number) [130]

       Assigns the phantom numbers. Each number will be assigned to a flexible
       CO button and used as a Phantom button.
           Blank or 0 through 9           2,3 or 4 digits

    2. Number(ISDN DDI Number/Extension Number Transformation) [131]

       Used to convert a DDI number to an Phantom extension number in order to
       put an incoming DDI call to a specific extension.
           0 through 9     Maximum 6 digits
   If you want to use this data, you must be assigned "0" on the program [990]
   System Additional Information, Field(28).










System Time

    1. System Time(Date and Time Set) [000]

       Sets the time of DSHS.
           Year : 0 through 9
           Month : Jan, Feb, Mar, Apr, May, Jun, Jul, Aug, Sep, Oct, Nov, Dec
           Date : 01 through 31
           Day of the week : SUN, MON, TUE, WED, THU, FRI, SAT
           Hour : 01 through 12     Minute : 00 through 59     AM or PM

           Date/Month/Year (SP)













Version

    1. Version(ROM Version Display) [116]

       Confirms the version of ROM of the DSHS.




















ISDN Card

  <Explanation>
    These parameter are only displayed and cannot be changed.

    1. Slot No.

       BASE:no parameter
       EXP(Explanation):Confirm the number of the slot installing the EXP. Card.

    2. Card Type

       Confirm the type of the installing Card.

    3. Connection

       Confirm the status of the connection between the CPU Card and the ISDN
       Card.
           DISCONNECT:Installing no ISDN Card,or the incorrect connecting
                      the Card,and or,the communication error of the CPU Card,
                      the ISDN Card.
           ACTION:During the trying estabishing the data communication.
           ESTABLISH:Establishment of the data communication.


ISDN Card


    4. RAM(even/odd)

       Confirm the RAM status of the ISDN Card, and it is displayed by OK or NG.
          OK:normal
          NG:Error(have the any obstraction)

    5. ROM Version

       Confirm the ROM version of the ISDN Card.

    6. ROM(even/odd)

       Confirm the ROM checksum of the ISDN Card.

    7. Communication Error Count

       Confirm the count of the occuring the checksum error in the message of
       the data communication between the CPU Card and the ISDN Card.




ISDN Card

    8. Card Reset Count

       Confirm the count of the reseting the ISDN Card.
       Normally,it makes a count after the power on.

    9. Clock Detect

       Confirm the status of detecting the clock from ISDN Network.
           o:possible to detect the clock
           x:impossible to detect the clock

   10. Clock Select

       Confirm the status of selecting the reference clock for synchronization.
           o:getting the synchronization on the line of this Card
           x:not getting the synchronization on the line of this Card







ISDN Card

   11. Port Status

       Confirm the status of every port of the ISDN Card.
           o:usable
           x:not usable


















TRS Deny

    1. TRS Deny(Toll Restriction Denied Code Entry) [301,302,303,304,305]

       Assigns telephone numbers prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















TRS Exception

    1. TRS Exception(Toll Restriction Excepted Code Entry) [306,307,308,309,310]

       Assigns telephone numbers not prohibited for each Toll Restriction level.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)



















ARS Mode/Time Modify Data

    1. Mode(Automatic Route Selection Mode) [312]

       Assigns to enable or disable the ARS feature.
           ON  or OFF

    2. Time(ARS Time) [313]

       Sets the starting time of 4 time zones.
           Time : Disable or [   ] AM/PM   Hour : 01 through 12    AM/PM

    3. Mod Remove/Add(ARS Modify Removed Digit and Added Number) [330,331]

       Assigns the deleted numbers and/or the added numbers for ARS
       modification.
           Remove:         0 through 9
           Add:            0 through 9     * # P or p(means Pause)







ARS Routing Plan

    1. ARS Routing Plan(ARS Routing Plans) [322,323,324,325,326,327,328,329]

       Assigns the order of priority of CO line groups and modification
       numbers which cost least in each time zone.
           1 through 8     Space(displayed as-)


















ARS Leading Digit

    1. ARS Leading Digit(ARS Leading Digit Entry)
       [314,315,316,317,318,319,320,321]

       Assigns dialing numbers for each ARS Routing Plan.
           0 through 9     *(a wild card character)


















Music & Paging

    1. Hold Music No.(Music Source use for Hold Music) [803]

       Assigns music sources for Hold Music.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music

    2. BGM No.(Music Source for BGM Assignment) [803]

       Assigns music sources for B.G.M.
       For KX-TD1232
           1 : Music Source 1 of Master DSHS
           2 : Music Source 2 of Master DSHS       - : No music
           3 : Music Source 1 of Slave DSHS
           4 : Music Source 2 of Slave DSHS
       For KX-TD816
           1 : Music Source 1 of DSHS or - : No music


Music & Paging

    3. Pager Tone(External Pager Confirmation Tone) [805]

       Assigns the confirmation tone for external pagers to be sent or not.
           ON or OFF

    4. Ex-Pager EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for External Pager 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           0 through 9

    5. BGM(External Pager BGM) [804]

       Assigns B.G.M. to be sent or not for external pagers 1 through 4
       for KX-TD1232 or for External Pager 1 for KX-TD816.
           ON or OFF







Administration & SMDR & Modem

    1. MODEM EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension number for MODEM which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. MODEM TYPE(MODEM Type Standerd) (For KX-TD1232 Only) [814]

       Assigns the type of a modem.
           BELL or CCITT

    3. RS-232C Interface(EIA(RS-232C) Parameters) [806,807]

           Parity : None, Mark, Space, Even, Odd
           NL Code : CR+LF or CR
           Word Length : 7 or 8 bits
           Stop Bit : 1 bit or 2 bit
           Baud Rate : 150, 300, 600, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600





Administration & SMDR & Modem

    4. SMDR Output Mode(SMDR Output Mode) [815]

       Regular or Charge

    5. SMDR Duration Log Outgoing(SMDR Outgoing Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns the type of SMDR outgoing calls being printed out.
           All ; All duration of outgoing calls
           Toll ; Only duration of Toll calls
           Off ; Not printed

    6. SMDR Duration Log Incoming(SMDR Incoming Call Log Printout) [800]

       Assigns to print out SMDR incoming calls.
           On ; All incoming calls     or    Off ; Not printed

    7. Format-Page Length(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines per page when the record is printed out.
           04 through 99



Administration & SMDR & Modem

    8. Format-Skip Perforation(SMDR Format) [801]

       Assigns the number of lines to be skipped at the end of every page.
           00 through 95

    9. SMDR Title Header(SMDR Title Header)

           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z      Maximum
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )  80 characters

   10. SMDR Header Start Line(SMDR Header Start Line)
           00 through 95

   11. SMDR Header Start Column(SMDR Header Start Column)
           00 through 80

   12. SMDR Data Start Line(SMDR Data Start Line)
           04 through 99

   13. SMDR Data Start Column(SMDR Data Start Column)
           00 through 80


DISA

    1. EXT No.(Floating Number Assignment) [813]

       Assigns Floating Extension numbers for DISA which is assigned as
       DIL 1:1 destination.
           0 through 9

    2. Security Mode(DISA Security Type) [809]

       Assigns the security mode for DISA.
           None or Trunk

    3. Tone-Detect(DISA Tone Detection) [810]

       Enables or disables Tone Detection for DISA CO-to-CO calls.
       Enabling tone detection allows the system to detect the end of the
       call.
           Disable or Enable






DISA


    6. REC Time(Outgoing Message Time) [215]

       Sets the time to record OGM 1 through 4. The total time of the OGM
       cannot exceed 64 seconds.
           0, 16, 32, 64 seconds

    7. Repeat(DISA DTMF Repeat) [812]

       Selects whether the system transmits DTMF signals directly to the
       central office(CO) or if the system repeats the DTMF signals to
       CO in order to adjust gain. This can be done for a DISA CO-to-CO
       call during dialing and/or during an established call.
       Dialing mode: DTMF signals will reach to central office.
       Talking mode: DTMF signals will reach to called party.
           Repeat or Through







User Code

    1. Code(DISA/TIE user code) [811]

       Assigns the DISA and TIE User Codes and a Class of Service
       (COS) to each code. The COS of the code determines the toll
       restriction level of the DISA and TIE caller.
           4 through 10 digits

    2. COS(COS number) [811]

           1 through 8













Additional Function

    FNC    BIT                    Explanation

    SYS1    1    Assigns to sent the music on hold or the ringback tone to
                 the calling party while being transferred automatically.

                    0 : The ringback tone                              [990]
                    1 : The music on hold

    SYS1    2    Assigns to judge disconnecting or the consultation hold to
                 press the hookswitch lightly and then place the handset in
                 case of having a conversation with a standrd telephone.

                    0 : The consultation hold                          [990]
                    1 : Diconnect

    SYS1    3    Assigns to send the hooking signal or the disconnecting signal
                 to CO lines when the Flash button is pressed in case of having
                 a conversation with a proprietary telephone.

                    0 : Disconnecting signal                           [990]
                    1 : Hooking signal


Additional Function

    SYS1    8    Assigns to enable or disable to hear the sound from CO lines
                 when Pause is sent to the lines in case of using a standard
                 telepone.

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]

    SYS1    9    Assigns to judge it the hooking signal or discnnecting
                 signal to press the hookswitch lightly in case of using
                 a standard telephone.

                    0 : Hooking signal      1 : On hook status         [990]

    SYS1   10    Sets the time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice Mail.

                    0 : 80 msec             1 : 160 msec               [990]








Additional Function

    SYS1   11,12 Assigns the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the System.

                    BIT     12      11          Time                   [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds

    SYS1   13,14 Sets the delayed time to send the DTMF signal to the Voice
                 Mail when the Voice Mail answers the DSHS and receives the
                 Extension Status signal.

                    BIT     13      14                                 [990]
                             0       0      0.5 seconds
                             0       1      1.0 seconds
                             1       0      1.5 seconds
                             1       1      2.0 seconds





Additional Function

    SYS1   15    Assigns to turn off the message waiting lamp.

                    0 : Turning off by being answered by the System    [990]
                    1 : Turning off by the Voice Mail

    SYS1   16    Assigns to start the Automated Attendant Service when an
                 outside call is received on the Voice Mail by FWD or IRNA.

                    0 : Not starting        1 : Starting               [990]

    SYS2    1    Assigns whether Transfer Recall occurs at the transfer
                 originating extension or Operator 1 if an outside party is
                 transferred and unanswered.

                    0 : Extension           1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS2    2    Assigns if Limited Call Duration is done for both outgoing and
                 incoming calls or outgoing calls only.

                    0 : Outgoing and incoming calls                    [990]
                    1 : Outgoing calls only


Additional Function

    SYS2    3    Assigns the Override Tone to be sent or not in case of Busy
                 Override, Barge in or Privacy Release.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    4    Assigns to enable or disable to check * and # under the Toll
                 Restriction.

                    0 : No check            1 : check                  [990]

    SYS2    5    Assigns to enable or disable to work the Flash function during
                 receiving an outside call at a station locked extension.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS2    6    Assigns Confirm Tone #3 to be sent or not.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS2    7    Assigns the pulse break ratio during dial pulsing.

                    0 : 60%                 1 : 67%                    [990]

    SYS2    8    Assigns if the Mailbox ID is substituted by the extension
                 number or it is programmable(free).

                    0 : Extension number    1 : Free                   [990]

    SYS2    9    Assigns the first display of LCD of digital proprietary
                 telephone(KX-T7235) in Station Speed Dial program.

                    0 : Names               1 : Numbers                [990]

    SYS2   10    Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold and BGM. (non use JT)

                    0 : Internal music source                          [990]
                    1 : External music source




Additional Function

    SYS2   11,12 Assigns inter-digit pause for pulse dialing.

                    BIT     12      11                                 [990]
                             0       0      630 ms
                             0       1      830 ms
                             1       0     1030 ms

    SYS2   13    Assigns intercom dial tone frequency.

                    0 : Normal              1 : Distinctive            [990]

    SYS3   1-16 &
    SYS4   1-8   These areas are provided to assign PAD Switch Control(Volume
                 control of received calls on a CO line). This can be assigned
                 per CO line. SYS 3 Bit 1 through 16 correspond to CO lines
                 1 through 16 and SYS4 Bit 1 through 8 correspond to CO lines
                 17 through 24 respectively.

                    0 : 0 dB                1 : -3 dB                  [990]




Additional Function

    SYS4    9    Prohibits or allows a call originated by an AA port of VPS to
                 another AA port.

                    0 : prohibit            1 : allow                  [990]

    SYS4   10    Restricts or allows sending pulse dialing signals during
                 a CO call.

                    0 : restriction         1 : no restriction         [990]

    SYS4   13    Enables or disables the pulse feedback sound when a dialed
                 number is sent to the CO line.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]









Additional Function

    SYS5    1    ISDN Layer 1 active mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    2    ISDN Data Lilnk mode

                    0 : By call             1 : Permanent              [990]

    SYS5    3    ISDN TEI mode

                    0 : Fix (0)             1 : Automatic              [990]

    SYS5    5    Assigns the reference mode whether the DDI call number of ISDN
                 shows the whole number or one digit at a time.

                    0 : whole number        1 : one digit at a time    [990]







Additional Function

    SYS5    7    In the day mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    8    In the night mode, DDI number can be selected to the operator
                 call.

                    0 : DIL 1:N             1 : Operator               [990]

    SYS5    9    Assigns whether the new page is ejected or not when the Hotel
                 Application is printed out by SMDR.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]

    SYS6    1    Sets the time after terminating the OGM.

                    0 : 0 sec.              1 : 5 sec.                 [990]





Additional Function

    SYS6    2    Programs whether or not the account code is printed out
                 in the SMDR.
                    0 : not printed out     1 : printed out


    SYS6    6    Selects the result when a CO call is routed by Call Forwarding
                 to a voice mail port which is in AA service mode.
                 (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                    disable : AA service mode
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode, this program
                 is not affected.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [990]








Additional Function

    SYS6    7    Selects the result when a CO call is routed to a voice mail
                 port by IRNA. (For both Inband and DPT Integration)
                 When the voice mail port is in VM service mode;
                    enable : VM service mode
                    disable : The mode will change to the AA service mode
                              (Only when Inband)
                 When the voice mail port is in AA service mode;
                    enable : The mode will change to the VM service mode and
                             a Follow-On ID is sent.
                    disable : AA service mode

                    0 : Enable              1 : Disable                [990]











Additional Function

    SYS6    8    Enables or disables sending CO line access code "9" to
                 a TIE line. When you dial CO line access code "9" and
                 the CO line is busy, the system can automatically send
                 CO line access code "9" to a TIE line so that you can
                 access the CO line through another PBX.

                    0 : enable              1 : disable                [990]

    SYS6    9    Assigns the display of the account code on the SMDR.

                    0 : secret              1 : not secret             [990]

    SYS6 10,11   Assigns the source of Music Sorce 1 of the DSHS for Music
                 on Hold. (JT)

                    00 : Internal music source                         [990]
                    01 : External music source
                    1x : Tone to Held line





Additional Function

    COS1-8 4,3,2,1 Assigns the number of the available digit to dial in case of
                   having a conversation with an outside party.

                    BIT     4  3  2  1                                 [991]
                            0  0  0  0      Not limited
                            0  0  0  1        1 digit
                            0  0  1  0        2 digits
                            0  0  1  1        3 digits
                            0  1  0  0        4 digits
                            0  1  0  1        5 digits
                            0  1  1  0        6 digits
                            0  1  1  1        7 digits
                            1  0  0  0        8 digits
                            1  0  0  1        9 digits
                            1  0  1  0       10 digits
                            1  0  1  1       11 digits
                            1  1  0  0       12 digits
                            1  1  0  1       13 digits
                            1  1  1  0       14 digits
                            1  1  1  1       15 digits



Additional Function

    COS1-8  5    Assigns to enable or disable the Call Forwarding-Follow Me
                 feature.

                    0 : Disable             1 : Enable                 [991]



















Caller ID

    The display on the telephone will show the caller's number which is
    provided by a specific central office without this program.
    If the name display is required, use this program.

    1. Caller ID Code(Caller ID Code Set) [110] (NL)

       Assigns the numbers of the callers.
           0 through 9

    2. Caller ID Name(Caller ID Name Set) [111] (NL)

       Assigns the names of the callers.
           0 through 9     A through Z     a through z
           * # ! ? space . , ' : ; / + - = < > $ % & @ ( )









